دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung Manualsdoor intercom systemsSAMSUNG ST10

ﺔﻴﻔﻴﻛ ﻝﻮﺣ ﺔﻠﺼﻔﻣ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺗ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻦﻤﻀﺘﻳ

ﻼﻣﺎﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻰﺟﺮﻳ .ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ

User Manual

ST10

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻊﺟﺮﻣ

ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ

ﺔﻴﺳﺎﺳﻷﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺔﻣﺪﻘﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺭﺎﻴﺧ

ﺮﻳﺮﺤﺘﻟﺍ/ﺽﺮﻌﻟﺍ

ﺓﺩﺪﻌﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﻂﺋﺎﺳﻮﻟﺍ

ﻖﺣﻼﻣ

ﺱﺮﻬﻓ

ﻉﻮﺿﻮﻣ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺮﻘﻧﺍ

Summary of content (107 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 2
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ—ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪١‬ﻡ‪ ٣/‬ﻗﺪﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻐﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪©2009 SAMSUNG DIGITAL IMAGING CO., LTD.‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪DIS‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫] [‬ ‫) (‬ ‫ ‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫†‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ )ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ(‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ؛ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫● ﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٣٣ e‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ( ‪٤٥ e‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٠ e‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ < s‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٣٣ e‬‬ ‫● ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤٥ e‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ‪٤٦ e‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ‪٤٦ e‬‬ ‫‪) EV‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ‪٥٣ e‬‬ ‫‪) ACB‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟ
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪......................................................................... DIS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪....................................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪................................................................. (EV‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪........................................................... (ACB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪٧٧ .........
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫● ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫● ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪13‬‬
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺃ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[POWER‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻼ ﺑﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻋﺞ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪OSD‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻬﺘﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ :OSD‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) a‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.a‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫*‪ Samsung Converter‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Xvid Codec‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Samsung Digital Camera‬‬ ‫‪ Installer‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪My Computer Removable Disk‬‬ ‫‪.DCIM 100SSCAM‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Windows 2000/Vista‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.My Computer Removable Disk‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ SDC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪PMP‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ TXT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TEXT‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ”‪ ,“PMP” ,“MP3‬ﻭ”‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Converter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪.(AVI, WMV, ASF, MPG [MPEG-1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Next‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫● ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
PAGE 29
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪(Mac‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٠٫٣‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٣‬‬ ‫● ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،PMP‬ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Samsung Converter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻞء‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺗﺪﻳًﺎ ﻣﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٥‬‬ ‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻜﺸﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.S a‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.s a‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ s a‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ f‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺨﻔﻲ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ s a‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ s a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪DIS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.p a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ )‪.(MPEG-4.AVI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.v a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫● ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢٤٠ × ٣٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤١‬‬ ‫● ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪vdspaS‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،v‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪. f‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪vdspaS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺴﺐ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﺡ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪spa‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻻﻣﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫‪spaS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻞء‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء*‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪apsd‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪) AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤٩‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫● ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ(‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻤﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟ ٍﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(EV‬‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ )‪(-‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪(0‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻄﻊ )‪(+‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫● ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﻪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )‪(ACB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.(ACB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ACB :‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫● ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ ACB‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.a‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،v‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫)ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫)ﻧﻬﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫● • ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪ ٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪vdspa‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻃﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫)‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :G ،‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :B ،‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ f‬‬ ‫‪) > f‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ( ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ > f‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪+2‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ < ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ > ﺃﻭ < ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ﺃﻭ < ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٦‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﺴﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤١‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫● ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪:‬‬ ‫‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪) .
PAGE 72
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻃﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫● ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ > ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪71‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(ACB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪) ACB‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٠‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫● ﺳﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.m a‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [POWER‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB cable‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪AAA.mp3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪BBB.sdc‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(*‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(*‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪Samsung.txt‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ*‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1/2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٢/١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪MPt‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺺ‪) .‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪(5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪MPt‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ*(‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪) .‬ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫● ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،s‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪) .
PAGE 92
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .DCF‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻘﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ (Secure Digital) SD‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ (Secure Digital High Capacity) SDHC‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ‪ /‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،a‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪ ،9M‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SLB-0937‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪900 mAh‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪3.7 V‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪٢٦٠‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 96
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻭﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬ ‫● ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .
PAGE 98
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .(DCF‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪) .
PAGE 99
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ ١٫٠٢) ″٢٫٥/١‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ‪CCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٩٫٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫● ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪ ،AEB‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ٤/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ٢,٠٠٠/١ - ١٦ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻡ ﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،H‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻴﻨﺖ ‪ ،L‬ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫● ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪،DIS ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‬ ‫ﻭﺛﻠﺞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟ
PAGE 101
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ١ SD‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪3456 x 2592‬‬ ‫‪١٩٤‬‬ ‫‪٣٧٦‬‬ ‫‪٥٤٦‬‬ ‫‪3456 x 2304‬‬ ‫‪٢٢١‬‬ ‫‪٤٢٦‬‬ ‫‪٦١١‬‬ ‫‪3456 x 1944‬‬ ‫‪٢٦٤‬‬ ‫‪٥١٠‬‬ ‫‪٧٤٤‬‬ ‫‪2592 x 1944‬‬ ‫‪٣٤٣‬‬ ‫‪٦٣٧‬‬ ‫‪٨٧٠‬‬ ‫‪2048 x 1536‬‬ ‫‪٥٣٢‬‬ ‫‪٨٩٥‬‬ ‫‪١,٢١١‬‬ ‫‪1024 x 768‬‬ ‫‪١,٧١٦‬‬ ‫‪٢,٠٥٩‬‬ ‫‪٢,٣٧٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ )‪(SLB-0937, 900 mAh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪/(SAC-47‬ﻛﺒﻞ )‪USB (SUC-C7H‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ ١٩ x ٦٠ x ٩١‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١٢٤٫٢‬ﺟﻢ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٤٠ - ٠‬ﻣﺜﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪٪ ٨٥ - ٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Samsung Converter ،Samsung Master ،Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪٥٤ ACB‬‬ ‫‪٢١ Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٤٨‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪٧٣ DPOF‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪٨٨ Quick View‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪Samsung Converter‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪٥١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻴ
PAGE 105
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٥٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪٥٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٤٦ ISO‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎ
PAGE 106
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٤٧‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻞء ‪٤٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ‪٩٠ AF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪٩٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٨ Mac‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢١ Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪٤٧‬‬
PAGE 107
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪http://www.samsungcamera.com/‬‬ ‫‪.